Инструкция обслуживания Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000

754 страниц 30.57 mb
Скачать

Перейти на страницу of 754

Summary
  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 1

    BUS CONNECTION BUS CONNECTION DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION ETHERNET CONNECTION ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSECNET/H CONNECTION MELSECNET/H CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 2

    ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 3

    A - 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly . The precautions given in this manual are concerne d with this product. In this manual ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 4

    A - 2 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] W ARNING ● Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious acciden t if the GOT backlight is gone out. When the GOT backlight goes ou t, the display sect ion dims, while the input of the touch switch(s) remains active. This may confuse an operator in thinking that t he GOT is in "scre ensaver" ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 5

    A - 3 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] WA R N I N G ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external pow er supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to/from the panel. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failu re or malfunction. ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external pow er supply used by the system b ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 6

    A - 4 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When inserting/removing a CF card into /from the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT1 1 ), turn the CF card access switch off in advance. Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card. ● When removing a SD card from the GOT(GT14), ma ke sure to support the SD card by hand, as it may pop out. Fai ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 7

    A - 5 [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] [TEST OPERA TION PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● Correctly wire the GOT power supp ly secti on after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the pr oduct. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure. ● T ighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range. Undertightening ca n ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 8

    A - 6 [ST ARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS] W ARNING ● When power is on, do not touch the terminals. Doing so can cause an elec tric shock or malfunction. ● Correctly connect t he battery connector . Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder , or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explod ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 9

    A - 7 [T OUCH P ANEL PRECAUTIONS] [BACKLIGHT REPLACEM ENT PRECAUTIONS] [DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. Howe ver , the difference between a touch ed position and the object position may occu r as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touch ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 10

    A - 8 [TRANSPORT A TION PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When transporting lith ium batteries, make sure to treat the m based on the tra nsport regulation s. (For details on models subject to restrictions, refe r to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.) ● Make sure to trans port the GOT main unit and /or relevant unit(s) in the manner they w ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 11

    A - 9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .............. ............. ............ ................. ............. ................ ............. ........... ............ A - 1 INTRODUCTION .... ............. ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. .............. ................... A - 9 CONTENTS ............ .... ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 12

    A - 10 MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS 2.DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD -700........ ................ ................ ................. .................. 2 - 8 2.2 MELSEC-L ............. ................ ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ... .................. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 13

    A - 11 4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link mod ule mounted on redund ant type extension base unit) ..... 4 - 28 4.9 Q Redundant Setting ........ ................. ............ ................. ............. ............ ................. ................... .. 4 - 29 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to t h e Control System U ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 14

    A - 12 6.3 Connection Diagram ........... ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ................ ........ ............ 6 - 22 6.3.1 RS-232 cable ........... ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ................ ............ ........ 6 - 22 6.3.2 RS-422 cable ........... .. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 15

    A - 13 8.4.2 Connecting to Built-i n Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) .......... ................ ............... 8 - 22 8.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet module (Q/L Series) ... .................... ................ ................ ............... 8 - 24 8.4.4 Connecting to C Controller module ........................ ................ ......... ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 16

    A - 14 11.CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List ...... ................ ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ........ ............ 11 - 2 11.1.1 PLC/Motion c ontroller CPU ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ............ .1 1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 17

    A - 15 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List ........... ................ ................ .................... ................ ................ ...... ....... ..... 14 - 2 14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU .......... ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ............... 14 - 2 14.1.2 CC-Li ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 18

    A - 16 15.5.12 Station number setting ............. ............. ............. ................ ............. ................ ............. . .... 15 - 43 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................. ................ ................ ................ .................... ......... ... .. 15 - 44 15.7 Precautions ............... .......... ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 19

    A - 17 18.4 GOT Side Settings ......... ................ ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ .......... ............. .. 18 - 8 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) ......... ................. ............ ......... 18 - 8 18.4.2 Communication detail settings ............ .......... ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 20

    A - 18 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? ... ................ ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ .. ........ 21 - 2 21.2 System Configuration ... ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ............. ... ... ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 21

    A - 19 22.6.12 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 ................ ................. ................... ................ ................ .......... 22 - 61 22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator ........ ................ ................. ................... ................ ............. 22 - 6 3 22.6.14 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator .... ................. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 22

    A - 20 MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to this product. Refer to each manual for any purpose.  Screen creation sof tware manuals  Connection manuals  Extended and option function manuals  GT Sof tGOT1000 manuals Manual Name Packaging Manual Number (Model code) GT Works3 V ersion1 Installat ion Procedure Manual Encl ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 23

    A - 21  GT16 manuals  GT15 manuals  GT14 manuals  GT12 manuals  GT1 1 manuals  GT10 manuals Manual Name Packaging Manual Number (Model code) GT16 User's Manual (Ha rdware) S tored in CD-ROM SH-080928ENG (1D7MD3) GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utilit y) S tored in CD-ROM SH-080929ENG (1D7MD4) GT16 Handy GOT User's Manua l ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 24

    A - 22 QUICK REFERENCE  Creating a project  Connecting a controller to the GOT  T ransferring data to the GOT Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 V ersion1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Setting available functions on GT Designer3 Creating a screen displayed on the GOT Obtaining use ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 25

    A - 23  Others Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and options) of each GOT • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT15 User's Manual • GT14 User's Manual • GT12 User's Manual • GT1 1 User's Manual • GT1 1 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT10 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 26

    A - 24 ABBREVIA TIONS AND GENERIC TERMS  GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GOT1000 Series GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M- XTBD GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M- STBD GT1675 GT1675M-S Abbrevuation GT1575 -STBA, GT1575-STBD GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M- VTBD GT1675-VN A ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 27

    A - 25  Communication unit *1 A9GT -QJ71LP23+GT15-75IF900 set *2 A9GT -QJ71BR13+GT15-75IF900 se t *3 A8GT -J61BT13+GT15-75IF900 set  Option unit *1 GT15-CFEX+GT15-CFEXIF+GT15-C08CF set GOT1000 Series Handy GOT GT16 Handy GOT GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD GT1 1 Handy GOT GT1 155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1 155HS-QSBD GT1 150HS-Q Abbrevi ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 28

    A - 26  Option Abbreviations and g eneric terms Description Memory card CF card GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05 -MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC, GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM- 512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC, GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM- 8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC SD card L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4 GBSD Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC Option function board GT16-MESB, ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 29

    A - 27  Sof tware  License key (for GT Sof tGOT1000) Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawin g software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen si mulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/G OT900 series GT Soft ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 30

    A - 28  Others Abbreviations a nd generic terms Description IAI Abbreviation of I AI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (fo rmer Y amatake Corporation) OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORA TION KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO EL ECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., L TD. SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp M ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 31

    A - 29 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL  Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual. Since the above page was created for explanatio n purpo se, it differs from the actual page. Not connectable model name Connectable model name BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List 5 - 2 Applicable model name Shows GT16. Shows GT15. Shows GT1 1. Shows GT1 1 (B ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 32

    A - 30  About system configuration The following describes the system configuration of each connec tion included in this manual. Since the above page was created for explanation pu rpose, it differs from the actual page. The configuration of The configuration of equipment connected equipment connected to GOT is shown. to GOT is shown. The cable ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 33

    1 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1 - 1 1. PREP ARA T OR Y PROCEDURES FOR MONIT ORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Inter face . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 34

    1 - 2 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1. PREP ARA T OR Y PROCEDURES FOR MONIT ORING The following sho ws the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding re ference sections. Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, an d perform the communication setting. 1.1 Setting the C ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 35

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.1 Setting the Communicatio ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 36

    1 - 4 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface 1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT .  Setting 1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the me nu. 2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 37

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Setting item This sectio ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 38

    1 - 6 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface (2) Setting [Controller T ype] The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used. For the settings, re fer to the following. *1 When using the mult iple CPU system When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of other station, se lect ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 39

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Ty p e Model name MELSEC-A A ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 40

    1 - 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface (3) Setting [I/F] The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used. Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT . (a) GT16 (b) GT15 3rd stage Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 Standard ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 41

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (c) GT14 (d) GT12 Standard i ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 42

    1 - 10 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface (e) GT1 1 •G T 1 1 S e r i a l •G T 1 1 B u s Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) [Front view] [Rear view] Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) Standard interface 3 (GOT bui ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 43

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (f) GT105 (g) GT104 (h) GT1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 44

    1 - 12 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface 1.1.2 I/F communication setting This function displays the list of th e GOT communication interfaces. Set the channel and the communication drive r to the interface to be used.  Setting 1. Select [Common] [I/F Communic ation Setting] from the menu. 2. The I ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 45

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Setting item The follow ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 46

    1 - 14 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface POINT POINT POINT Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting] (1) Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Mu lti-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. Mitsubishi Products 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 47

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Da ta and OS on to the GOT 1 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.2 W riting the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 48

    1 - 16 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT Confirm if the standard monitor OS, co mmunication driver , op tion OS, project data and communication settings are properly written onto th e GOT by reading fro m GOT using GT Designer3. For readin ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 49

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.3 Option Devices ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 50

    1 - 18 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1.3.2 Option unit 1.3.3 Conversion cables 1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter 1.3.5 Serial Multi-Dr op Connection Unit 1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter Product name Model S pecifications Printer unit GT15-PRN USB slave (PictBridge) for connect ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 51

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.3.7 Inst alling a ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 52

    1 - 20 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection (3) Calculation example (a) When connect ing the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 unit s), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function) and a bar code r eader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT , they can b ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 53

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT C ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 54

    1 - 22 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection  When using a MELSECNET/H communicatio n unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Networ k communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Install a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Cont rol ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 55

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When using a ME ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 56

    1 - 24 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection  When using the printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit The printer unit, sound output uni t, or ex ternal I/O unit can be installed in any po sition (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension i nterface. Example: When installing a printer un ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 57

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT P ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 58

    1 - 26 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables fo r the Respective Conne ction 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection T o conne ct the GOT to a d evice in the respecti ve connection typ e, connection cables betw een the GOT and a device are necessary . For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 59

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  RS-422 inter ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 60

    1 - 28 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables fo r the Respective Conne ction  RS-485 interface Use the following as the RS-485 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT . For the GOT side of the connection cable , use a connec tor and conn ector cover applicable to the GOT connector . (1) Conn ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 61

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.4.2 Coaxial ca ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 62

    1 - 30 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables fo r the Respective Conne ction 1.4.3 T erminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specification s on the GOT side. When setting the terminating resisto r in each connection type, refer to the following.  RS-422/485 communication unit Set the ter ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 63

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 31 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  GT12 Set the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 64

    1 - 32 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables fo r the Respective Conne ction  GT1030 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.  GT1020 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Terminating resistor selector switch Terminating resistor selector switch ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 65

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 33 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.4.4 Setting th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 66

    1 - 34 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognize s Connected Equipment 1.5 V erifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment V erify the GOT recogni zes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility . • Channel number of communicatio n interface, communication dri vers allocation status • Communica tion unit ins ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 67

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equip ment 1 - 35 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3. The [Communicat ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 68

    1 - 36 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognize s Connected Equipment  For GT15, GT14 or GT1 1 1. After powering up the GOT , touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility . 2. T ouch [Communica tion setting]. (The screen on the left is not displayed on GT1 1.) 3. The [Communication Setting] appears. 4. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 69

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equip ment 1 - 37 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  For GT10 1. Af ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 70

    1 - 38 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognize s Connected Equipment POINT POINT POINT Utility (1) How to display Utility (at default) (2) Utility call When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second o n the setting screen of the utility call key , press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sou nds.For th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 71

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 39 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitorin ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 72

    1 - 40 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring  Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully , it means correct co mmunication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O ch eck screen by ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 73

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 41 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Communication monitoring func ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 74

    1 - 42 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring  Confirming the communication st atus with network unit by GOT (1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system The communication status between the GOT and the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system can be confirmed by the Utility screen of t he GOT . For deta ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 75

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 43 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) For CC-Link IE Controller Net ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 76

    1 - 44 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring (4) For CC-Link system The communication status between the GOT and the CC-Li nk System can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT . For details on the operation met hod of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the follow ing manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 77

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 45 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.6.2 Confirming the communicatio ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 78

    1 - 46 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring  Confirming the communication st ate on the GOT (For GT16, GT14) [PING T est] can be confir med by the Util ity screen of the GOT . For details on the operation metho d of the GO T Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic Util ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 79

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 47 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.6.3 Confirming the communicatio ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 80

    1 - 48 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring (2) Faulty station information (GS231 to GS238) The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set.(0: Normal, 1: Abnormal) The bit is reset after the fault is recovered. (a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) (b) Ethernet multiple connect ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 81

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 49 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Network No., station No. noti ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 82

    1 - 50 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1.6.4 Check on GX Developer  Check if the PLC CPU recognize s the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mod e) only) Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer , ch eck if the PLC CPU recognizes th e GOT or not. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the fol ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 83

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 51 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Checking the wiring st ate (F ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 84

    1 - 52 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring  Checking if the GOT is performed the dat a link correctly (1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in [Other station information] . For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the follow ing manua ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 85

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 53 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) For CC-Link IE Controller Net ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 86

    1 - 54 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1.6.5 Check on GX Works2  For CC-Link IE Field Network system Use [CC IE Field diagnostics] of GX W o rks2 to c heck if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Works2 operation method, refer to the followin g manual. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Net ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 87

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 55 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.6.6 Check on the PLC  Checki ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 88

    1 - 56 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 89

    MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS 2. DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 3. ACCESS RAN GE FOR MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 4. HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 5. BUS CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 6. DIRECT CONNECTION ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 90

    ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 91

    2 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2 - 1 2. DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR , CRnD-700 . . . . . . . 2 - 8 2.2 MELSEC-L ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 92

    2 - 2 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2. DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET The device ranges that can be set for the Mitsubishi PLCs are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the fo llowing tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. The device specification s of c ontrollers may differ depending on the models, even though belon ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 93

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Setting item (For MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC /DR, CRnD-700) (For MEL SEC-F X ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 94

    2 - 4 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (1) Setting of the CPU No. (a) When monitoring a single CPU system Set to 0. (b) When monitoring a multiple CPU system Set the CPU No. (0 to 4) in [CPU No.] when monitoring a multiple CPU system. When [CPU No.] is set to "0", the monitoring target differs depending on the con nection method. (2) When ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 95

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX) Set the item for monitoring or writing ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 96

    2 - 6 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b1 1 and b28 to 31 of the buffer memory . Example: The monitor value is 00070003 H when monitoring BM0=87654321 H as mask type 3. BM0=05000100 H wh en writing input value 87654321 H to BM0=0000000 0 H as mask type 3. (e) Mask type 4 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and wr ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 97

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION •( F o r 3 2 b i t s ) Monitor and write only b8 to b15 and b24 to 31 of the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 98

    2 - 8 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC- QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700] *10 as the controller type. *1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file regi ste ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 99

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.2 MELSEC-L 2 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2.2 MELSEC-L The device ranges that can be set when s electing [ME ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 100

    2 - 10 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*] *13 as the controller type are as follows. *1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file regi ster set at [ ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 101

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion 2 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion The device ranges ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 102

    2 - 12 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.5 MELSEC-A 2.5 MELSEC-A The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-A] as the controller type are as follows. (1) For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT1 1 *1 In the computer li nk connection, the bit specification writing of the word d evice to the ER29-0 (block 29 of th e extension file register) or l ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 103

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.6 MELSEC-FX 2 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2.6 MELSEC-FX The device ranges that can be set when s electing ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 104

    2 - 14 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.7 MELSEC-WS 2.7 MELSEC-WS The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-WS] as the controller type are as follows. POINT POINT POINT (1) Devices of MELSEC-WS Only reading is possible for all devices. (2) Device settings of MELSEC-WS • Input(I), Output(Q) • Logic result(LQ), Logic inp ut(LI) ? ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 105

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.7 MELSEC-WS 2 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (4) When using of fset sp ecification When setting devices using ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 106

    2 - 16 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.7 MELSEC-WS ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 107

    3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3 - 1 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONIT ORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring S tations on Network Systems . . . . . . . . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 108

    3 - 2 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONIT ORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring S t ations on Network Systems 3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSE CNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, C C-Link IE Field Network  Bus connection (1) When connecting to multiple CPU system • Th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 109

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) When connecting ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 110

    3 - 4 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems  Direct CPU connection/computer link connection (1) When connecting to multiple CPU system • Corresponding to the access range described in ■ Bus connectio n (1). (2) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU • Corresponding to the access range d ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 111

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  MELSECNET/H conn ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 112

    3 - 6 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems POINT POINT POINT Precautions when using the QCPU re dundant system When monitoring other ne tworks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a re lay station. If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay st ation, t he GOT cannot switch the moni torin ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 113

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Monitor accessib ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 114

    3 - 8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems Example 2: When using bus connection • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks S pecify the accessing network No. or st ation as shown in the following table. (1) T o moni tor B or W of the connected ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 115

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Example 3: When usin ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 116

    3 - 10 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems Example 4: When usin g CPU direct connection o r computer link connection • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks S pecify the accessing network No. or st ation as shown in the following table. (1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 117

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Example 5: When usi ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 118

    3 - 12 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems Example 6: When usin g CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4) : Accessible : Not accessible S tation to be accessed S tation connected to GOT QnA (1-1) Q (Q mode) (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnN (1-4) QnA (1-1) Q(Q mode) (1-2) ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 119

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Con nection 3 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3.2 Access Rang ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 120

    3 - 14 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring  When using Bus connection/CPU direct connection/computer link connection Only connected stations can be monitored.  When using CC-Link connection (intellige nt device station) (1) Access range The master station ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 121

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 3 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (b) Monitoring PLC CPU devi ces ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 122

    3 - 16 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring  Monitoring overview The following two methods are availa ble for monitoring by the GOT with CC-Link communication uni t. *1 This program is not required if the CC-Link parameter se tting sequence program and GOT communication sequence program satisfy the follow ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 123

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring 3 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3.4 Dat a ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 124

    3 - 18 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU  Setting method of monitor device The following example descri bes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting monitor devices . (1) Monitoring the connected station (host station ) and B and W allocated by the link paramete ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 125

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Stat ion in MELSECNET/H Networ k System 3 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3.6 Connec ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 126

    3 - 20 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System  Direct CPU connection (1) The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G , QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU. Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit. For cables required for connection with th e netwo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 127

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Stat ion in MELSECNET/H Networ k System 3 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Ethern ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 128

    3 - 22 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.7 Connection to the Head Modul e of CC-L ink IE Field Ne twork System 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System When connected to the head module o f the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master station and local stations. When connecting the GOT to t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 129

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Fi eld Network System 3 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POI ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 130

    3 - 24 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.7 Connection to the Head Modul e of CC-L ink IE Field Ne twork System ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 131

    4 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4 - 1 4. HOW T O MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O S tat ion in MELSECNET/H Network System . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 132

    4 - 2 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4. HOW T O MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM This section explains the restricti ons on the connecti on methods and other information applicable when th e QCPU redundant system is monito red by the GOT . In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monito ring target specified as the control sys ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 133

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION The following co nnection methods are available for the QC PU redundant syst ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 134

    4 - 4 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM The following table shows the featu res of each connection method. Connection type Before system switching After system switching • Direct CPU connection (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) • Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station on MELSEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 135

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Connection type Before system switching After system switching • CC-Link c ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 136

    4 - 6 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM *1 T o monitor the control system after the system switching wit hout the Q redundant setting, change th e cable connection from t he PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system swit ching. *2 T o monitor the control system after the system switchi ng without the Q redundancy s ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 137

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system (1) A ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 138

    4 - 8 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O S tation in MELSECNET/ H Network System 4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connec tion to the remote I/O station) This section explains the direct CPU conne ction that connec ts the GOT to the remote I/O sta ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 139

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Stat ion in MELSECNET/H Networ k System 4 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1.2 C ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 140

    4 - 10 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System 4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station) This section explains the Ethernet connecti on for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/ O station of the MELSECNET/H netwo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 141

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 Direct CPU Connection This section describes ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 142

    4 - 12 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4.2.2 When using two GOT s Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to the system sw itching. (1) Connection method Connect GOT s to the RS-232 interf ace of the control system and standb y system CPU modules (Q12 PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system. For details, refer to t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 143

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2.3 Precautions when connecting a GO T di rectl ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 144

    4 - 14 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection The following diagram show s an example of screen setting using SM1515. System configuration e xample: when using one GOT Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that perfo rms the following operations for when connecting a GOT to control system and st andby system. 1) When c ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 145

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1. Set the screen switching device of the base sc ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 146

    4 - 16 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1. Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Displ ay (Bit). Select [Object] [Comme nt Display] [B it Comment] and set Comment Di ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 147

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4. Set the touch switches on the base screen 1. B ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 148

    4 - 18 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.3 CC-Link Connection (I ntelligen t Device Station) 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device S tation) This section describes the CC-Link connection (intel ligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connec ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 149

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligen t Device Station) 4 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Monitoring target ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 150

    4 - 20 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) 4.4 CC-Link Connection (V ia G4) This section explains the CC-Link connectio n (via G4) t hat connects the GOT to the AJ65BT -G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GO T to th e AJ65BT -G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. (1) Connection meth ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 151

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) 4 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Monitoring target change when system sw ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 152

    4 - 22 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Conne ctions (Network Systems) 4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) This section explains the MELSECNET/ H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GOT to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system. The following provide ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 153

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Networ k Connection (Network System) 4 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.6 CC-Link ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 154

    4 - 24 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.7 Ethernet Connection 4.7 Ethernet Connection This section explains the Ethernet connecti on t hat connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system. The following shows a n example of connec ting the GOT to th e Ethernet network. (1) Connection method Connect the Ethernet n etw ork system to the GOT . For ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 155

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit 4 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.8 Connection to ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 156

    4 - 26 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redund ant Type Extension Base Unit 4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Et hernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the Ethernet co nnection for connecting the GOT to the Et hernet module moun ted on the re dundant type extension base ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 157

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit 4 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.8.3 CC-Link conn ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 158

    4 - 28 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redund ant Type Extension Base Unit 4.8.4 CC-Link connection (V ia G4) (Co nnection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the CC-Link connectio n (Via G4) fo r connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mo unted on the redundant type ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 159

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.9 Q Redundant Setting 4 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.9 Q Redundant Setting The following e xplains the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 160

    4 - 30 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.9 Q Redundant Setting *1 Pair number Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration. Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair . Example: Ethernet connection (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2) POINT POINT POINT Precautions for making Q ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 161

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 31 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 162

    4 - 32 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 1. Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [S tation No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device. Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen swit ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 163

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 33 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 164

    4 - 34 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function HINT HINT HINT When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redunda nt system only , SW56 (curr ent control station) can be set as the station number switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the G ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 165

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 35 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 166

    4 - 36 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4. On the screen 1, set the switch for writing the st ation No. 1 to the st ation number switching device. After the GOT is started up, the station number switching device value of the GOT is "0". For Ethernet connecti ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 167

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 37 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 168

    4 - 38 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function • As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number . When the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the m onitorin g target to the co ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 169

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 39 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 170

    4 - 40 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 3. Set monitor screens. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection o r Ethernet connection: (Common) • Create a monitor scree n with each ob ject whose network setting is S tation No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1). • Crea ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 171

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 41 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 172

    4 - 42 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4. Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current m onitor st ation, and if it is OFF (standb ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 173

    5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5 - 1 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 5. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 174

    5 - 2 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When using the bus extension connecto r box, att ach it to the e x tension base unit. (Connecting it t o the main base unit is not allowed.) *2 For the multiple CPU system con ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 175

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List 5 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (Continued to next page) *1 Only GT1 15 -Q BDA can be connected. * ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 176

    5 - 4 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List *1 Only GT1 15 -Q BDA can be connected. *2 Only GT1 15 -Q BDQ can be connected. *3 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 177

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration POINT POINT POINT When "CONTROL BU S E ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 178

    5 - 6 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When 2 to 5 GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q cat alog (L(NA)08032). *2 When installin g the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension connector box is requi red. Attach the bus extensi on connector box to t he extension connector of th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 179

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *4 When connecting 3 or more GOT s, the overall cable length is rest ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 180

    5 - 8 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 181

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.2.2 Connecting t o QnACPU or AnCPU  When one GOT is connected * ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 182

    5 - 10 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When 2 to 3 GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 When installin g the GOT 6.6m or more away from the ma in base unit, the bus connector conversio n box is required. *3 When connecting to multiple GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 183

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *6 About the bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 184

    5 - 12 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU  When one GOT is connected Main base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Extension base unit Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Extension cable Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) PLC Connection cable 2) GOT Max. distance Extens ion base Extension cable *1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 185

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 For details on the extension cabl es, refe r to the MELSEC-A/QnA ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 186

    5 - 14 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When two GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the ma in base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *3 When connecting to multiple GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, us ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 187

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *6 About the bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 188

    5 - 16 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When three GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 The connection of multiple GOT s When connecting to multipl e GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, use GT1 1 as a terminal. *3 The number of connectable GOT s is restricted according to ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 189

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *4 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.1 GT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 190

    5 - 18 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU *1 The number of connectable GOT s is restricted depending on the number of intell igent function modules mounted to the A0J2HCPU. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOT s *2 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75 ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for rem ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 191

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.2.5 Connection t o motion controller CPU (A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 192

    5 - 20 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When two GOT s are connected *1 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the ma in base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *2 When connecting to multiple GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, use GT1 1 as a terminal. *3 When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, connect a ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 193

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *5 The bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a term ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 194

    5 - 22 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When 2 to 3 GOT s are connected *2 *1 The connection of multiple GOT s When connecting to multipl e GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, use GT1 1 as a terminal. *2 The number of connectable GOT s is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. 5.4.12 W ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 195

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *3 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.1 GT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 196

    5 - 24 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1))  When one GOT is connected Main base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Extension base unit Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Extension cable Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) PLC Connec ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 197

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 For details on the extension cabl es, refe r to the MELSEC-A/QnA ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 198

    5 - 26 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When two GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit . *3 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the ma in base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *4 When connecting to mult ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 199

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *7 The bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a term ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 200

    5 - 28 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When 2 to 3 GOT s are connected *4 *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit . *3 The connection of multiple GOT s When connecting to multipl e GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, use GT1 1 as a terminal. *4 The num ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 201

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *5 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.1 GT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 202

    5 - 30 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 3. Set the following ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 203

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5 - 31 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT (1) Communicati on interface setting by Utility The ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 204

    5 - 32 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings POINT POINT POINT When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer , set "10" to the number of slots for the extension base used for GOT connection. HINT HINT HINT Setting unused I/O slots to empty (0 point s ) (only when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 205

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5 - 33 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) Other than QCPU (Q mode) Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 206

    5 - 34 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5.4 Precautions 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS (1) Composition of GT15-C EXSS-1 It is composed of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15- C BS (10 to 30m). Calculate the cable le ngth based on GT15-C100EXSS- 1(10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) and GT15- C300EXSS-1(30m). (2) GT15-C EXSS-1 connector Connect the connector ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 207

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5 - 35 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.4.3 Powering OFF the GOT , reapplying the power (OFF to ON) (1) Precaution ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 208

    5 - 36 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5.4.8 When designing the system When the GOT is OFF , the following currents are suppli ed to the GOT from the PLC CPU side (the power supply module on the mai n base unit).(The GOT does not opera te when it is OFF .) Design the system so that th e 5V DC current consumption of the modules on the main ba se u ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 209

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5 - 37 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (4) When using the QA1S6 B extension base unit A GOT is physically connected ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 210

    5 - 38 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOT s (1) System including dif ferent GOT series The GOT1000 series can be co nnected with GOT -A900 series in a system. When using them together , refer to the fo llowing T echnica l News. Precautions when Replacing GOT - A900 Series with GOT1000 Series (GOT -A-0009) The GOT1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 211

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5 - 39 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.4.14 When connecting to a Q4ARCPU red undant system (1) When the GOT is bu ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 212

    5 - 40 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 213

    6 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6 - 1 6. DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 214

    6 - 2 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List 6. DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later . *2 Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU syst em. *3 Exclude the G ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 215

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List 6 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (Continued to next page) *1 When connecting in direct C ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 216

    6 - 4 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When monitoring A0J2HCPU, A2 C CPU or A2SCPU, only the follo w ing or later software version is used to write to the CPU. • A0J2HCPU (with/without li nk): V ersion E or later • A0J2HCPU-DC24: V ersion B or late r • A2CCPU, A2SCPU: V ersion H or later *2 W ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 217

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List 6 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 GT1 1 can not access the master stat ion on MELSECNE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 218

    6 - 6 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounte d on GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS232 connection diagram 3)) *3 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection di ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 219

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6.2.2 Connect ing to LCPU *1 Connect it to the RS-232 int ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 220

    6 - 8 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2)) *3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the followi ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 221

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6.2.4 Connect ing to ACPU *1 Connect it to the RS-232 int ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 222

    6 - 10 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.5 Connecting to FXCPU  When connecting to FX 0 , FX 0S , FX 0N , FX 1 , FX 2 or FX 2C *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) *3 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 223

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 1S , FX 1N , FX 2N , FX 1NC , ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 224

    6 - 12 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration *6 GT14, GT12, GT1 1 and GT10 are available for the multiple-G T14 , GT12, GT1 1, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOT s. 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION *7 When using function expansion boards or function ada pters, confirm the communication sett ing ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 225

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 1S , FX 1N , FX 2N , FX 1NC , ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 226

    6 - 14 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration  When connecting to FX 3G (RS-422 connection) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) *3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connectio ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 227

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 3G (RS-232 connection) *1 For ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 228

    6 - 16 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration  When connecting to FX 3GC (FX 3GC -/ D , F X 3GC - /DSS) (RS-422 connection) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) *3 For details ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 229

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 3U or FX 3UC (FX 3UC - -L T(-2 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 230

    6 - 18 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration  When connecting to FX 3U or FX 3UC (FX 3UC - -L T(-2)) (RS-232 connection) *1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. 19. GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION *2 When the function expansion board (comm unicatio n board) and the functi on adapter are connected, a GOT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 231

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 3UC (FX 3UC -/ D , F X 3UC -/ ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 232

    6 - 20 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.6 Connecting to WSCPU *1 Use the RS-232 connection model. 6.2.7 Connecting to the motion controller CPU *1 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS232 connection diagram 3)) *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).It cannot be mounted on GT15 5 . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 233

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT When connecting to the motion controll ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 234

    6 - 22 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.3 Connection Diagr am 6.3 Connection Diagram The following diag ram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 6.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1) RS232 connection diagram 2) RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FX PLC side (D-sub 9-pin) 1 3 2 6 5 8 4 7 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 235

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.3 Connectio n Diagram 6 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 236

    6 - 24 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.3 Connection Diagr am  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cabl e must be within th e maximum distance specifications. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector , refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifica tions  Connecting terminating resistors ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 237

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.4 GOT Side Settings 6 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings 6.4.1 Setting c ommunication interfac ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 238

    6 - 26 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.4 GOT Side Settings *1 This is effective when collecting a large data on oth er than the monitor screen (logging, recip e function, etc.). Howe ver , when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the i nfluence on the sequence scan time, do not set "High& ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 239

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.4 GOT Side Settings 6 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (4) MELSE C-A (GT10) (5) MELSEC-WS POINT POINT POINT (1) Co ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 240

    6 - 28 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.5 Precautions 6.5 Precautions  Connection to FXCPU (1) When connecting to FX 3G /FX 3GC /FX 3U /FX 3UC series When the keyword of FXCPU (FX 3G /FX 3GC /FX 3U / FX 3UC series) has been set, GOT may not be able to monitoring.Perform an I/O ch eck again. ( ■ Perform an I/O check) When the result of the I/ O ch ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 241

    7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7 - 1 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 242

    7 - 2 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. 7.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later . *2 For GT10, do not include in the multip ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 243

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (Continued to next page) *1 Use only modules with the up ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 244

    7 - 4 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCP U(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU. In addition, A0J2-C214-S 1 (A0J2HCPU-dedicated computer link module) canno t be used. *2 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 245

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 GT1 1 can not access the master stat ion on MELSECNET ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 246

    7 - 6 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module *1 Communication cannot be performed with RS-485. A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used. *2 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used for the function version A. Both CH1 and CH2 can be used together for the function version B or later . *3 Only CH2 can be ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 247

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7.2.1 Connect ing to QCPU (Q mode ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 248

    7 - 8 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7.2.2 Connecting to LCPU *1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User' s Manual (Basic) *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT165 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 249

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.2.3 Connect ing to QCPU (A mode) *1 For the system confi ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 250

    7 - 10 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7.2.4 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type) *1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Serial Communications Module Use r ’s Manu al (Modem Function Additional V ersion) *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built int ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 251

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 For the system configuration on the computer link modu ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 252

    7 - 12 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.2 System Configuration *1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Mode m Function Additional V ersion) For the system configuration on the comput er link module side, refer to the following ma ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 253

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.2.6 Connect ing to ACPU (AnCPU t ype) *1 For the system ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 254

    7 - 14 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnS CPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC) *1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print . func.) User’s Manual *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It canno ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 255

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.3 Connectio n Diagram 7 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.3 Connection Diagram The following dia gram shows the co ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 256

    7 - 16 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.3 Connection Diagr am  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length o f the RS-232 cable must be 15m or le ss. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector , refe r to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifica tions RS232 connection diagram 3) PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin For GT1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 257

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.3 Connectio n Diagram 7 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.3.2 RS-422 c able  Connection diagram  Precautions ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 258

    7 - 18 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.3 Connection Diagr am  Connecting terminating resistors (1) GOT side When connecting a PL C to the GOT , a terminati ng resistor must be connected to the GOT . (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". (b) For GT14, GT1 1, GT10 Set the t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 259

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings 7 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings 7.4.1 Setting c ommunication interface ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 260

    7 - 20 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings *1 This is effective when collecting a large data on oth er than the monitor screen (logging, recip e function, etc.). Howe ver , when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the i nfluence on the sequence scan time, do not set "High ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 261

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings 7 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) AJ71C24/UC24 (4) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10) POINT POINT POINT (1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 262

    7 - 22 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7.5 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates un der the following transmission specifications when it i s con nected to a Mitsubishi PLC in the computer link connection. The PLC side settings (the serial communicatio n module, computer link modul e) are ex pla ined in Section 7.5.1 to Section 7.5.3. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 263

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) When connecting to the CH2 side *1 The module operates un ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 264

    7 - 24 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7.5.2 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) POINT POINT POINT Serial communication module (QnA Series) For details of the serial communication module (QnA Series), refer to the following manu al. Serial Communication Module User' s Manual (Modem Function Additional Version) ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 265

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (a) T ransmission spee d setting (SW09 to SW12) Set the trans ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 266

    7 - 26 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting (1) Mode setting switch (2) T ransmission specifications switch (a) AJ71UC24 • Transmission speed setting (SW13 to SW 15) Set the transmission speed (SW 13 to SW15) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consiste nt with that of the GOT side. *1 Only transmission speeds availabl ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 267

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION • T ra nsmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) Set the trans ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 268

    7 - 28 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting POINT POINT POINT When connecting the GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT 10 and the computer link unit When the GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 and the computer link unit are conne cted via RS-232C, set the buffer memory in the computer li nk un it using the sequence program so that CD signals are not checked. Ex ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 269

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.6 Precautions 7 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.6 Precautions  T ime taken until the PLC runs wh en connected ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 270

    7 - 30 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.6 Precautions ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 271

    8 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 1 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 272

    8 - 2 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later . *2 Use a module with the upper five digit s later t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 273

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (Continued to next page) *1 If the A series Ethernet module i ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 274

    8 - 4 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modules with the following pro duct n ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 275

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 The supported version of the main units varies dependi ng ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 276

    8 - 6 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8.1.2 Ethernet module *1 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnAC PU, the GOT can monitor the de vices as the same as the case of AnACPU. However , the following devices cannot be moni tored. • Devices added to QnACPU • Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (In case of QnACPU, ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 277

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8.2.1 Connect ion to Ethernet module ? ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 278

    8 - 8 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration *3 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance dif fers depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of th e connec table nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T : Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a c ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 279

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to MELSEC-FX *1 The destination connected w ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 280

    8 - 10 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration *6 When using an Ethernet module with the FX 3UC series, FX 2NC -CNV -IF or FX 3UC -1PS-5V is required. *7 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. *8 When using an Ethernet module with the FX 3U series, F X 3U -CNV -BD, FX 3U -422-BD, or FX 3U ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 281

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2.2 Connection t o Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controlle ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 282

    8 - 12 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F *1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet net work system . Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other syst em equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 283

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2.4 Connect ion to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 284

    8 - 14 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (B uilt-in Ethernet port Motion Cont roller CPU) *1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet net work system . Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other syst em equipment cor ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 285

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8.3.1 Setting c ommunication interface (Com ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 286

    8 - 16 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings *1 T o connect the GOT with the Etherne t module (Q Series) in the one-on-one relation ship using a cross cable, set [T imeout Time] to 6sec. or longer . *2 Click the [Setting] button an d perform the sett ing in the [GO T IP Address Setting] screen.  GT15 *1 T o connect the GOT with the Ethern ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 287

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT (1) Exa mple of [Detail setting]. For examples ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 288

    8 - 18 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings POINT POINT POINT (1) E xample of [Ethernet setting] For examples of [Ethernet setting], refer to the following. 8.4 PLC Side Setti ng (2) Parameter reflection functi on of MELSOFT Navigator (a) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 289

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT (1) Routing parameter setting of relay station ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 290

    8 - 20 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.1 Connect ing to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to-one connection) This section descri bes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Connecting to Built-in Ethe rnet port CPU For details of Built ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 291

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  [Controller Setting] and [Et hernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POI ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 292

    8 - 22 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) This section describes th e sett ings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in t he following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ether net port CPU, ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 293

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) Open settings The setting is re quired for all the con nected ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 294

    8 - 24 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows  . Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows  . (a) When normal communication C:>Ping 192.168.0.1 Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes= 32 time <10ms TTL=32 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 295

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter : Ne ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 296

    8 - 26 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting (3) Routing pa rameter setting Up to 64 [ Transfe r Network No.]s can be s et. However , the same transfer network n umber cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that ca n access to other station from the request source host GO T is 64 kind s of [T ransfer Network No.]s. P ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 297

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Confirming the communication st ate of Ethernet module (1) Whe ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 298

    8 - 28 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  Utility setting for C Controller module (1) Q12DCCPU-V Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E V er .3.05F or later for the C Controller setting utility . (a) Co nnection settings : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP addre ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 299

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (d) System settings : Necessary : As necess ary : Not necessary (2 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 300

    8 - 30 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting (1) Controller setting (2) Ethernet setting *1 Set the same value as that o f GOT N/W No. *2 Set a value different fr om that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the sa me network.  Checking communication state of C Controller m odule (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 301

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 31 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Switch settings of Ethernet module Set the operation mode sett ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 302

    8 - 32 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  [Network p arameter] of GX Developer (1) Network p arameter : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT . *2 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT . POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network pa ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 303

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 33 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Communication confirmation The RDY LED on the Ethernet module ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 304

    8 - 34 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  Switch settings of Ethernet module Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch. *2 The figure of AJ71E71N3-T and A1SJ71E71N3-T . (1) Operation mode setting switch : Necessary : As necess ary : Not necessary (2) Exchange condition setting switch *1 : Necessary : A ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 305

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 35 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Sequence program The sequence program for initia l processing ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 306

    8 - 36 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Example of sequence program POINT POINT POINT When changing the sequence p rogram After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether tu rning OFF and then ON or resetting. IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.0.19) Initial request COM. ERR turned off request Clear the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 307

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 37 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Communication confirmation The RDY LED on the Ethernet module ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 308

    8 - 38 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet module (FX Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following ca se of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Ethernet module (FX Se ries) For details of the Ethernet module (FX Series), refer to the following ma ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 309

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 39 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) Operational settings :Required :Set if necessary :Not required ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 310

    8 - 40 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  Ethernet parameter settings of FX 3U -ENET - ADP (1) Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX Work s2. T o set FX 3U -ENET -ADP , GX Works2 V er .1.90U or l ater is required. For details on the setting of FX 3U -ENET- ADP , refer to the following manu al. FX 3U -ENET ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 311

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 41 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  [Controller Setting] and [Et hernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Contr ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 312

    8 - 42 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.8 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC C70) This section describes the sett ings of the GOT and Display I/F (CNC C70) in the foll owing case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Display I/F (CNC C70) For details of the Display I/F (CNC C70), refer to the following manual. C70 Series SET UP ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 313

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 43 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) Ethernet setting POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] and [E ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 314

    8 - 44 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.9 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module This section describes the se ttings of the GOT , Ethernet adapter modu le and the PLC in the following system configuration.  System configuration *1 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet (network No.) of the Et ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 315

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 45 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Ethernet Adapter Module setting Set the parameter with the Eth ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 316

    8 - 46 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.10 C onnecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) This section describes th e sett ings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port Motion Contro lle r CPU in the following case of system co nfiguration. POINT POINT POINT (1) GOT type setting For details, refer to the fo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 317

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 47 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION : Necessary : As necess ary : Not necessary (2) Open settings The ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 318

    8 - 48 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnosti cs of GX Works2/GX Developer , refe r to the following manual. GX Works2 V ersion1 Operating Manu al (Common) G ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 319

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.5 Precautions 8 - 49 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.5 Precautions  Connection to QnA (S) CPU type Use B or a late r fu ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 320

    8 - 50 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.5 Precautions  When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *. *.*.255 are used by the system) The GOT may n ot monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administra to r of the network before setting an IP ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 321

    9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 9 - 1 9. MELSECNET/H CONNEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 322

    9 - 2 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC T O PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List POINT POINT POINT (1) Connectable network When using MELSECNET/H in NET/10 mode, refer to MELSECNET/10 CONN ECTION. Connect the GOT to the following netw ork systems as an ordinary station. • M ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 323

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 324

    9 - 4 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modules with ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 325

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 326

    9 - 6 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module *1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H net work module and CPU. CPU series Model name Optical loop Coaxial bus MELSEC-Q (Q mode) *1 MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71LP21 QJ ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 327

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.2 System Configuration 9 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INV ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 328

    9 - 8 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.2 System Configuration *3 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MEL SECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PL C to PLC network) For the coaxial cable conne ctor connec tion me thod, refer to the foll owing. 1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector co nnection method *4 T ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 329

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.3 GOT Side Settings 9 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 330

    9 - 10 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.3 GOT Side Settings *1 Cannot be set for the QCPU redundant system. *2 For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network Syst em Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) POINT POINT POINT (1) C ommunication interface setting by Utility The communication interface set ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 331

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 332

    9 - 12 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings (1) S tation number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT . (2) Mode setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *2 Set the same mode setting and tran smission speed as those of the GO ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 333

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 334

    9 - 14 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings  Connecting to C Con troller module Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E V er .3.05F or later for the MELSECNET/H utility . (1) Connection settings : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP addre s s o ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 335

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 336

    9 - 16 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.5 Precautions 9.5 Precautions  Network configuration Use MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC netwo rk) to configur e a network inclu d ing the GOT . The following networks including the GOT canno t be configur ed. • MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network)  Network type setting • S peci fy all the netwo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 337

    10 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 10 - 1 10. MELSECNET/10 CO ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 338

    10 - 2 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC T O PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connect able Model List POINT POINT POINT (1) Connectable network The MELSECNET/10 connecti on includes the MELSECNE T/H network system used in the MELSECNET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connect ed to the re mote ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 339

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectab le Model List 10 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 340

    10 - 4 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A2UCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU - - A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCP UR21 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 341

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectab le Model List 10 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 342

    10 - 6 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List 10.1.2 M ELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module *1 Use function version B or later of the CPU and MELSECNET/H net work module. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC-FX FX 0 - - FX 0S FX 0N FX 1 FX 2 - FX 2C FX 1S - FX 1N FX 2N FX ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 343

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.2 System Configuration 10 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 344

    10 - 8 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.2 System Configuration 10.2.2 C onnecting to the coaxial bus system *1 Use a PLC CPU and MELSECNET/H network module of function ver s ion B or lat er . *2 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals. Q corresponding MELSEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 345

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.3 GOT Side Settings 10 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 346

    10 - 10 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.3 GOT Side Settings *1 Cannot be set for the QCPU redundant system. *2 For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network Syst em Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (2) MELSECNET/10 POINT POINT POINT (1) When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used When conn ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 347

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.3 GOT Side Settings 10 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 348

    10 - 12 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10.4.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H network module This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/H network module in the following case of system configuration. When connecting the MELSECNET /H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 349

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 350

    10 - 14 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (b) Network range assignment : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. *2 Set it when the MEL SECNET/H network module is used i n the redundant QnPRHCPU system. POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parame ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 351

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 352

    10 - 16 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (b) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [T ransfer Network No.]s can be set. However , the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that c an access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [T r ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 353

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 354

    10 - 18 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (1) Network number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT . (2) Group number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (3) S tation number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 355

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 19 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 356

    10 - 20 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Network range assignment : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 357

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 21 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 358

    10 - 22 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting  Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module Set for each setting switch. (1) Network number setting switch : Necessar y : As nec e ssary : Not necessary *1 Specify the sa me network No. as that of the GOT . *2 Do not specify a number between 240 and 255. (2) Group ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 359

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 23 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 360

    10 - 24 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Network range assignment : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 361

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 25 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 362

    10 - 26 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.5 Precautions 10.5 Precautions  Network configuration Use the MELSECNET/10 m ode of MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) to configure a net work in cluding the GOT . (1) The following networks inclu ding the GOT cannot be configur ed. • MELSECNET/10 ( ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 363

    11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIF IER CONNECTION 11 - 1 11. CC-Link IE CONT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 364

    11 - 2 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 Connectable Model List 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 Connectable Model List 1 1.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 365

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 C onnectable Model List 11 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 366

    11 - 4 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 Only the first step can be used on the ext ension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). Series Model name Clock Communicati on type Refer to MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2USCPU - - A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 367

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 C onnectable Model List 11 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 368

    11 - 6 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 Connectable Model List 1 1.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit *1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digit s of the serial No. 12052 or later . CPU series CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit *1 MELSEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 369

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.2 System Configuration 11 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 370

    11 - 8 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.3 GOT side settings 1 1.3 GOT side settings 1 1.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of connectin g equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 371

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.3 GO T side settings 11 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 372

    11 - 1 0 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC- Link IE controller network mo dule in the followi ng case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link IE Controller Network module For details of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 373

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 374

    11 - 1 2 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [T ransfer Network No.]s can be set. However , the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that c an access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [T ra ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 375

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 1 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 376

    11 - 1 4 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [T ransfer Network No.]s can be set. However , the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that c an access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [T ra ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 377

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 1 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 378

    11 - 1 6 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.5 Precautions 1 1.5 Precautions  GOT startup in CC-Link IE Controller Network connection For the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, the data link is started approximately 13 seconds after the GOT startup.  When a network error occurs in the syste m alarm In the CC-Link IE Cont ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 379

    12 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 12 - 1 12. CC-Link IE FIEL ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 380

    12 - 2 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connect able Model List 12.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q00JCPU - - Q00CPU *1 Q01C ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 381

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectab le Model List 12 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 382

    12 - 4 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 Only the first step can be used on the ext ension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *2 For the PLC CPU area, use a module with the upper five digits later th an 12012. Only the PLC CPU area can be monitored. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 383

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectab le Model List 12 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 384

    12 - 6 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List 12.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit CPU series CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit MELSEC-Q(Universal mod el) QJ71GF1 1-T2, QD77GF16 MELSEC-L LJ71GF1 1-T2 MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF1 1-T2 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 385

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.2 System Configuration 12 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 386

    12 - 8 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.3 GOT side settings 12.3 GOT side settings 12.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of connectin g equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list me ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 387

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.3 GOT side settings 12 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CO ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 388

    12 - 10 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.4 PLC Side Setting 12.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC- Link IE controller network mo dule in the followi ng case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link IE Field Network Module For details of the CC-Link IE F ield Network module, refer to the fol ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 389

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.4 PLC Side Setting 12 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CO ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 390

    12 - 12 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.4 PLC Side Setting  GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network T ype: CC IE Field) POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting ] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 12.3.1 Setti ng communication int erface ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 391

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.5 Precau tions 12 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 392

    12 - 14 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.5 Precautions ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 393

    13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 13 - 1 13. CC-Link CONNECT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 394

    13 - 2 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List 13 . CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 13.1 Connect able Model List 13.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function vers ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 395

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectab le Model List 13 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 396

    13 - 4 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modu ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 397

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectab le Model List 13 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 398

    13 - 6 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2 System Configuration 13.2 System Configuration 13.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link V er .1 compatible *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the followin g manuals. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT1 1N Control & Communication Link S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 399

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2 System Configuration 13 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 400

    13 - 8 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2 System Configuration 13.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link V er .1/V er . 2 compatibles mixed *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the followin g manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT1 1N *2 For the specifications and inquiries of th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 401

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings 13 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 402

    13 - 10 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings *1 Transmission speed settings The following list s the transmission speed settings of the CC- Link communication. For details of the hard ware test, refer to the fol lowing manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual for CC-Link mod ule to be use ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 403

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings 13 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 404

    13 - 12 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13.4 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates as the stations of which are shown below in the CC-Link system. The switch settings and parame ter settings of the PLC side (CC-Link module) are described in 13.4.1 to 13.4.7. HINT HINT HINT Number of stations occupied The numb ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 405

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 406

    13 - 14 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  Parameter setting (when connect i ng to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network p arameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (b) S tation information setting : Necessar y : As nec e ssary : Not necessary *1 When the [ ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 407

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 408

    13 - 16 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used (2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Se ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 409

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 410

    13 - 18 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (b) St a tion information setting : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (V er . 2 mode)], [Remote station point s] can be set. [Remote sta tion points] is a setting for the remot e I/O station. T ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 411

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 19 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 412

    13 - 20 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with V er .1/V er .2 compatibles mixed This section de scribes the setting of the GOT and CC-L ink module (Q Series) with V er .1/V er .2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Lin ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 413

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 21 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 414

    13 - 22 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  Parameter setting (when connect ing to C Controller m odule) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E V er .3.05F or later for the CC- Link utility . (1) Connection settings : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, i ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 415

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 23 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 416

    13 - 24 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13.4.4 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link V er .1 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L in the follo wing case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT (1) C C-Link module (L Series) For det ails of the CC-Link module ( ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 417

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 25 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 418

    13 - 26 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  [Network p arameter] of GX Developer (1) Network p arameter : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Set the S tart I/O No. o f the CC-Link module according t o the system configuration. (2) S tation information setting : Necessar y : As nec e ssary : Not ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 419

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 27 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 420

    13 - 28 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (3) T ransmission speed setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT . (4) Condition setting switches : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *2 Will be valid when the CC-Link module is the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 421

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 29 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 422

    13 - 30 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (d) E xample of sequence p rogram POINT POINT POINT When changing the sequence p rogram After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether tu rning OFF and then ON or resetting. Data link startup normal completion (buffer memory) Data link ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 423

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 31 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 424

    13 - 32 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) Set for each setting switch. (1) S tation number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (2) Mode setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (3) T ransmission speed setting switch : Necessa ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 425

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 33 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 426

    13 - 34 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (c) Example of sequence program (CC-Link de dicated instruction) (Continued to next page) * Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLP A instruction * Setting of automatic refresh parameter with dedicated RRP A instruction Module ready Module error Module ready ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 427

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 35 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 428

    13 - 36 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Program condition (for FROM/T O instruction) This program writes p arameters to the buffer memory when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN and automatically starts the data link with FROM/TO instruction. (a) I/O signal of CC-Link module Control & Communi ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 429

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 37 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 430

    13 - 38 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used (2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Se ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 431

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.5 Precau tions 13 - 39 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INV ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 432

    13 - 40 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.5 Precautions  Connection to Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monito r the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0 " or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 433

    14 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 14 - 1 14. CC-Link CONNECT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 434

    14 - 2 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (V ia G4) 14.1 Connect able Model List 14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later . *2 Only master station can ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 435

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectab le Model List 14 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 436

    14 - 4 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modules with the followin ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 437

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectab le Model List 14 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONN ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 438

    14 - 6 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.2 System Configuration 14.2 System Configuration 14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the followin g manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT1 1N *2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicat ed cable ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 439

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.2 System Configuration 14 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 440

    14 - 8 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.3 Connection Diagram 14.3 Connection Diagram The following diag ram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 14.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-232 cabl e must be 15m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT s ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 441

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.4 GOT Side Settings 14 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 442

    14 - 10 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.4 GOT Side Settings HINT HINT HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal devi ce, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setti ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 443

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTIO ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 444

    14 - 12 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings (3) Operation setting DIP switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud rate set in the GOT . 14.5.6 [Controller Se tting] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Operation mode of peripheral connecti on module Be sure to set th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 445

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTIO ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 446

    14 - 14 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) Set the station numb er setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. (1) S tation number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (2) T ransmission rate/mode setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : N ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 447

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTIO ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 448

    14 - 16 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings (2) [Parameter Set ting] of CC-Link utility (a) Network parameter : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 If the CC-Link module [Mode] is [Remote net -V er .1 mode], [Remote statio n points] ca nnot be set. *2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT . POINT POINT POINT When chan ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 449

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.6 Precau tions 14 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 450

    14 - 18 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.6 Precautions ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 451

    MITSUBISHI F A DEVICE CONNECTIONS 15. INVERTER CO NNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 1 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNE CTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 1 18. CNC CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 452

    ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 453

    15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 15 - 1 15. INVER TER CONNE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 454

    15 - 2 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List 15. INVER TER CONNECTION 15.1 Connect able Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to FREQROL FREQROL-A500/A500L RS-422 15.2.1 FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 RS-422 15.2.2 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 455

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 456

    15 - 4 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration  When connecting to multiple inverter s (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter . *3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., L ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 457

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 458

    15 - 6 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the computer link o p tion) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For GT1 1 and GT10, the number of connectable inve rters differs according to the hard ware version. Fo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 459

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 460

    15 - 8 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration  When connecting to multiple inverter s (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter . *3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTR IC CO., L ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 461

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 462

    15 - 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700  When connecting to one inverter *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter . *3 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 463

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 464

    15 - 12 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D GT1030-H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020-L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hard w are version Number of connect able Inverter ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 465

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 466

    15 - 14 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15.2.4 Connecting to FR EQROL-A700/F700/700P  When connecting to one inverter *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . FREQROL 500/700 Communication driver Inverter GOT Connection cable Inverter Connection cable GO T Number of con ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 467

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 468

    15 - 16 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D GT1030-H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020-L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hard w are version Number of connect able Inverter ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 469

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 470

    15 - 18 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15.2.5 Connecting to MD-CX522- K (-A0)  When connecting to one inverter *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter . FREQROL 500/700 Communication driver Inverter GOT Connection cable Invert ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 471

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 19 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 472

    15 - 20 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D GT1030-H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020-L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hard w are version Number of connect able Inverter ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 473

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Conne ction Diagram 15 - 21 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 474

    15 - 22 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram *1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in t he FR-A5NR of the inverter located far thest from the GOT . The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A 5NR. *2 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 475

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Conne ction Diagram 15 - 23 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 476

    15 - 24 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram *1 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR fro m the GOT . *2 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable". For GT14, GT1 1 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a termin ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 477

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Conne ction Diagram 15 - 25 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 478

    15 - 26 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram *1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest invert er from the GOT to ON (100 ). *2 Set the terminating resistor of GO T side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ". 1.4.3 T erminating resistors of GOT *1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ". 1.4.3 T ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 479

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Conne ction Diagram 15 - 27 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 480

    15 - 28 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cabl e must be 500m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector , refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifica tions (3) Inverter connector specifications (a) P in layout in the PU port Th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 481

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 GOT Side Settings 15 - 29 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 482

    15 - 30 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 GOT Side Settings HINT HINT HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal devi ce, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setting conten ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 483

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 31 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 484

    15 - 32 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.2 Connecting FREQROL-E500 series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of inver ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 485

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 33 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 486

    15 - 34 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.4 Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings o ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 487

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 35 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 488

    15 - 36 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.6 Connecting FREQROL-E700 series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of inver ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 489

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 37 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 490

    15 - 38 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.8 Connecting FREQROL-F700/700P series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 491

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 39 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 492

    15 - 40 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.9 Connecting FREQROL-F700PJ series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of inv ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 493

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 41 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 494

    15 - 42 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs HINT HINT HINT (1) Automatic setting with Pr .999 If Pr .999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 495

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 43 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 496

    15 - 44 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Desi gner3. The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 497

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 15 - 45 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNEC ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 498

    15 - 46 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set POINT POINT POINT (1) M onitoring Pr .37 GOT cannot monitor the paramete r (Pr .37) of FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F70 0PJ/ E700. (2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter (Pr) "8888" and "9 999" designate special function. T ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 499

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.7 Precau tions 15 - 47 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AM ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 500

    15 - 48 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.7 Precautions ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 501

    16 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 16 - 1 16. SER VO AMPLIFIE ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 502

    16 - 2 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List 16. SER VO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connect able Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. *1 For the RS-422 communication, use MELSERVO-J4 of sof tware version A3 or a later version. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSERVO- J2-Super MR-J2S- ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 503

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTI ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 504

    16 - 4 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16.2.2 Connecting to the MELSER VO-J2M Series  When connecting via RS-232 communication *1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.  When connecting via RS-422 communication *1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 505

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTI ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 506

    16 - 6 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration  When connecting to multiple serv o amplifiers (RS-422 connection ) *1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTR IC CO., L TD. For details, con tact HACHIKO EL ECTRIC CO., LT D . GOT Distributor Connection cab ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 507

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTI ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 508

    16 - 8 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Connection Diagram 16.3 Connection Diagram The following diag ram shows the connection between the GOT and the servo amplifier . 16.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram  Precautions when prep aring cable (1) Cable length The length o f the cable R S-232 must be 15m o r less. (2) GOT side connector Fo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 509

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Conne ction Diagram 16 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTIO ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 510

    16 - 10 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Connection Diagram RS422 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 4) RS422 connection diagram 5) *1Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as possible. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - GOT side Distributor side (Modular connector) 3 5 2 7 1 6 4 8 SDA RDA RSA CSA SG SDB RDB RSB CSB FG ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 511

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Conne ction Diagram 16 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTI ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 512

    16 - 12 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 GOT Side Settings 16.4 GOT Side Settings 16.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 3. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 513

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 GOT Side Settings 16 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 514

    16 - 14 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16.5.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series POINT POINT POINT MELSERVO-J2-Super Series For detai ls of the MELSER VO-J2-Super Series, refer to the following manual. See the technical manual for the MELSERVO- J2-Super Series servo a ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 515

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 516

    16 - 16 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16.5.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4,J3 Series POINT POINT POINT MELSERVO-J 4, J3 Series For details of the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series, refer to the following manual. See the technical manual for the MELSERVO- J4, J3 Series servo amplifiers.  Parameters of MELSERVO-J4, J3 Se ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 517

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 518

    16 - 18 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set POINT POINT POINT Monitoring servo amplifier Carefully read the manual of servo amplifier to be connected and fully un derstand the operating procedures before monitoring. Before operation, check the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause some machines to perform unex ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 519

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 19 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 520

    16 - 20 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (3) MELSERVO-J2M-*DU *1 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing paramet e rs to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writing p arameters to E 2 PROM of the servo amplifier . *2 The GOT cannot read or write data f rom/to consecutive devices. POINT POINT POINT Precau ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 521

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 21 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 522

    16 - 22 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (g) Input signal for test oper ation (for test operation) (h) F orced output of signal pin (for test operatio n) (i) Set data (for test operation) (4) MELSERVO-J2S-*A *1 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writ ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 523

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 23 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 524

    16 - 24 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the p arameter data. (e) St atus display (f) Alarm (g) E xternal I/O signal (h) I nput signal for test operation (fo r test operation) (i) F ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 525

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 25 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 526

    16 - 26 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effect ive when the pow er is turned of f once and back on after sett ing the parameter data. (e) St atus display Device name Item Symbol *1 PRM0, PRM1000 Command system/ ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 527

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 27 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 528

    16 - 28 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (6) MELSERVO-J2S-*CL *1 PRM0 to PRM90 are used when writing parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1090 are used when writing p arameters to E 2 PROM of the servo amplifier . *2 The GOT cannot read or write data f rom/to consecutive devices. *3 Use the integer nu ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 529

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 29 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 530

    16 - 30 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (f) Alarm (g) E xternal I/O signal (h) C urrent position latch d ata (i) The value of the general-purpose register (Rx) (j) The value of the general-purpose register (Dx) (k) Input signal for test operati on (for test operation) (l) Forced output of signal pin (for test operat ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 531

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 31 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 532

    16 - 32 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (e) G ain filter parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the p arameter data. (f) Extension setting parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting b ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 533

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 33 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 534

    16 - 34 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (j) External input (k) External o utput (l) Input signal for test oper ation (for test operation) (m) Forced ou tput of signal pin (for test operation) (n) S et data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol DI0 Input device statuses ― DI1 External input pin statuses ― ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 535

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 35 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 536

    16 - 36 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (d) B asic setting parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the p arameter data. (e) G ain filter parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting beco ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 537

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 37 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 538

    16 - 38 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (j) Alarm (k) External inpu t (l) External output (m) Point table (position) (n) I nput signal for test operation (fo r test operation) (o) Forced output of signal pin (for test operati on) (p) S et data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number ― ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 539

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 39 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 540

    16 - 40 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (d) B asic setting parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the p arameter data. (e) G ain filter parameter Device name Item Symbol *1 P A1, P A1001 Opera tion mode *STY P ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 541

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 41 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 542

    16 - 42 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (h) Extension setting 2 parameter (i) Extension setting 3 parameter (j) S tatus display (k) Alarm (compatible with MELSER VO-J3-*A) Device name Item Symbol PE1 to 40, PE1000 to 1040 For man ufacturer sett ing ― PE41, PE1041 Function sele ction E-3 EOP3 PE42 to 64, PE1042 to ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 543

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 43 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 544

    16 - 44 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (m) External input (n) External output (o) Input signal for test oper ation (for test operation) (p) F orced output of signal pin (for test operatio n) (q) S et data (for test operation) ALM246 Detailed alarm from Al arm History 6th alarm in past ― ALM247 Detailed alarm from ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 545

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.7 Precau tions 16 - 45 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 546

    16 - 46 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.7 Precautions ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 547

    17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 17 - 1 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2 17.2 System Configuration . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 548

    17 - 2 17. ROBOT CONTRO LLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connect able Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. For details on the connection with CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) , refe r to Mitsubishi Product s (Chapter 5 to 13). 17.2 System Configuration 17.2.1 Connecting to robot controlle ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 549

    17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 17 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 17.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the c ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 550

    17 - 4 17. ROBOT CONTRO LLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings *1 Click the [Setting] button an d perform the sett ing in the [GO T IP Address Setting] screen.  GT15, GT12 Item Description Range GOT NET No. Set the network No. of the GOT . (Default: 1) 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT . (Default: 1) 1 to 64 GOT IP Address Set ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 551

    17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 17 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION POINT POINT POINT Example of [Detail setting]. For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the fo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 552

    17 - 6 17. ROBOT CONTRO LLER CONNECTION 17.4 PLC Side Settings 17.4 PLC Side Settings 17.4.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot controller in the fo llowing case of syst em configuration. POINT POINT POINT Robot controller (CRnD-700) For details of the robot controller (CRnD-700), refe ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 553

    17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.4 PLC Side Settings 17 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] a ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 554

    17 - 8 17. ROBOT CONTRO LLER CONNECTION 17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set 17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range that can be used on the GOT , refer to the following. 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC , Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 17.6 Precautions  When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP ad ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 555

    18 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18 - 1 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 2 18.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 556

    18 - 2 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.1 Connect able Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. *1 Use the NC system software ver s ion D0 or late r. *2 Includes the case on the MELSECNET/H network system in the NET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network.. For the con ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 557

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.2 System Configuration 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU *1 Connect the connector of the CNC side to TERM ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 558

    18 - 4 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) POINT POINT POINT (1) Connectable network MELSECNET/10 connection includes the case th at MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode.The GOT cannot be connected to th e remote I/O network. Connect the GOT to the following netw ork systems as an ordinary ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 559

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (i ntelligent device station) *1 The overall extension cable length and t he len ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 560

    18 - 6 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18.2.4 Ethernet connection *1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet net work system . Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other syst em equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use c ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 561

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.3 Conne ction Diagram 18 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.3 Connection Diagram The following dia gram shows the conne ction between the GOT and the CNC. 18.3.1 RS ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 562

    18 - 8 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 3. Set the foll ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 563

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) MELSECNET/H *1 For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MEL SECNET/H Network System Re ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 564

    18 - 10 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings (4) CC-Link V er .2 (ID) *1 Transmission speed settings The following list s the transmission speed settings of the CC- Link communication. For details of the hard ware test, refer to the fol lowing manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual for CC-Link mod ule to be used (5) CC- ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 565

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (6) Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 (a) G T16, GT14 *1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 566

    18 - 12 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings (b) GT15, GT12 POINT POINT POINT (1) Communicati on interface setting by Utility The commu n ication in terface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Se ttings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility , refer to the following manual. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 567

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 13 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.4.3 Ethernet setting *1 For operating CNC monitor function, set N/W No. to "239" . 18.4.4 Switc ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 568

    18 - 14 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings (3) S tation number setting switch (4) Mode setting switch POINT POINT POINT (1) Switch setting exampl e For the switch setting exam ple, refer to the following. 18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connecti on (2) W hen the switch setting is changed When changing the switch setting a fter mounting the MELSECNET/10 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 569

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 15 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (3) T ransmission baudrate setting switch (4) Condition setting switches POINT POINT POINT (1) Switch settin ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 570

    18 - 16 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection  Parameter setting Set parameters related to MELSECNET/10 with MELSEC's peripheral devices in the same way as parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by Personal computer . However , in the case of using the default parame ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 571

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18 - 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Expansion unit setting s (1) FCU6-EX879 (Optical fiber cable) *1 Set th e network type to the PLC t o PL ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 572

    18 - 18 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings (2) FCU6-EX878 (Coaxial cable) *1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network. *2 Set as necessary . *3 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. *4 Set the station type to the control station. For details of the p arameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 573

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18 - 19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.5.2 CC-Link (I D) connection  Parameter setting Set parameters related to CC- Link connection wi th GX ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 574

    18 - 20 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings (2) Contents of setting *1 Set as necessary . *2 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. For details of the p arameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 No. Switch name Settings 1) Condition setting switch Set the operation condit ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 575

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18 - 21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.5.3 Ethernet connection  System configuration The following shows the example of the system configurat ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 576

    18 - 22 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings (b) Example of GX Developer setting For details of the paramete r s etting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 POINT POINT POINT IP address setting IP address setting on GX Develope r is invalid. Set the IP address b y the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 577

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 18 - 23 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details of the device range that can be used on the GOT , r ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 578

    18 - 24 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.7 Precautions 18.7.4 Ethernet connection  Vi a network system GOT with Ethernet communication cannot access the CNCs in another network via the CNC (n etwork module, Ethernet module, etc.).  When connecting to multiple GOT s When connecting two or more GOT s in the Ethernet network, set each [PLC No.] to t h e G ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 579

    MUL TIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 19. GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 1 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 580

    ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 581

    19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19 - 1 19. GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that ca n be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 2 19.2 Connectable Model List . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 582

    19 - 2 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored 19. GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored The GOT can monitor only a CPU to which a serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly . Serial Multi-Drop Unit ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 583

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19.2 Connect able Model List  Connecting the CPU to the Serial Mult i-Drop Connection Un ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 584

    19 - 4 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU. • AnNCPU(S1) with link: V ersion L or later , AnNCPU(S1) without link: V ersion H or later • A2SCPU: V ersion H or later *2 GT10 can be connected ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 585

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 When monitoring A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, only the following or later ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 586

    19 - 6 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 It is available by installing t he real time clock function boa rd or th e EEPROM memory with the real time clock function. *2 SB, SW , Ww , Wr , ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored. Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master modul ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 587

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master mod ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 588

    19 - 8 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List  Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (h ereinafter referred t o as "master module") in computer link connection The following table shows the connectable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU functi ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 589

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 Ww and Wr devices cannot be mo nitored. Series Model name Clock ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 590

    19 - 10 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modules with the following ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 591

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 It is available by installing the real time clock fu nction bo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 592

    19 - 12 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT FREQROL FREQROL-A500/A500L RS-422 RS-485 FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J FREQROL-D700 FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FR ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 593

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 13 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  [Controller T ype] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 The following table show ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 594

    19 - 14 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.3 System Configuration 19.3 System Configuration *1 Connect it to the RS-422/485 interface (built into GOT). *2 The maximum distance from the PLC to the terminal GOT . *3 When the number of connected GOT s is in creased, the response p erformance decreases. *4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into G ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 595

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.4 Conne ction Diagram 19 - 15 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19.4 Connection Diagram The following diagra m shows the cable connection between th e serial ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 596

    19 - 16 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram *1 Use the tw isted pair ca ble for SDA/ SDB. *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "1 10 ". *3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". 1.4.3 T erminating resistors of GOT *4 Connect a 1 10 terminating resistor to the GOT t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 597

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.4 Conne ction Diagram 19 - 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 Use the twisted pair cabl e for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB. *2 Set the terminat ing resistor selec ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 598

    19 - 18 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram *1 Use the tw isted pair ca ble for SDA/ SDB. *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "1 10 ". *3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". 1.4.3 T erminating resistors of GOT *4 Connect a 1 10 terminating resistor to the GOT t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 599

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.4 Conne ction Diagram 19 - 19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 Set the terminat ing resistor selector to "OPE N". *2 Set th e termina ting resi ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 600

    19 - 20 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram *1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "1 10 ". 19.6.3 Setting switches *2 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS -232/485 signal conv ersion adaptor as follows. 2-wire type/4-wire type: 2-wire type (1Pair) • When GOT is a terminal T erminati ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 601

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.4 Conne ction Diagram 19 - 21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION POINT POINT POINT Mixed wiring with various GOT s The GOT multi-drop connecti on can be used w ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 602

    19 - 22 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.3mm 2 or more as a cable for GOT multi-drop connection.The following shows recommended model names a nd manufacturers of the cable to be used. (2) Cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to termina ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 603

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.5 GOT Side Settings 19 - 23 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19.5 GOT Side Settings 19.5.1 Setting communication interface (communication settings) Set the c ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 604

    19 - 24 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19.6.1 W rite the OS Write the st a ndard monitor OS and communicati on driver according to the desired conn ection type onto the serial multi-drop connection unit. For the OS writing methods, refer to the follow ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 605

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19 - 25 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Controller setting 1. Set the following to the dr iver for the co ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 606

    19 - 26 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (2) Assignment content s of the PLC side word device The following table shows the device assignment contents when setting [Head Device (10 Points)] to "D0". (3) Details on the word device assignment content s (a) Control signal 1-1 < 10 second cycl ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 607

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19 - 27 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Exporting/Importing the communication setting content s (1) Expor ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 608

    19 - 28 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19.6.3 Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type. POINT POINT POINT Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit For details on the Seri al Multi-Drop Connection Unit, refer to the following manual. Serial Multi-Drop Connectio n Unit User ’s Manu ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 609

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.7 Setting of connection conversio n adapter 19 - 29 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter 19.7.1 Setting switches Se ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 610

    19 - 30 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.8 Precautions 19.8 Precautions  Connecting GT16 and GT15 in multi-drop connection (1) S tandard mo nitor OS installation, Writing Communication driver When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop conn ection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (V ersion ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 611

    20 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20 - 1 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 2 2 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 612

    20 - 2 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connect able Model List For details of connectable models, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 20.2 System Configuration 20.2.1 Connecting the GOT to ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 613

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.2 System Configuration 20 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 When GT14, GT12, GT1 1 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multi ple ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 614

    20 - 4 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.2 System Configuration 20.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface *1 When GT14, GT12, GT1 1 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connect ion function is not supported. *2 The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-232 built-in product. *3 For the connecti ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 615

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.3 Conne ction Diagram 20 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20.3 Connection Diagram The following dia gram shows the conne ction ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 616

    20 - 6 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.3 Connection Diagram 20.3.2 RS-422 cable  Connection diagram  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length o f the RS-422 cable must be 30m or le ss. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector , refe r to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifica ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 617

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings 20 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings 20.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communi ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 618

    20 - 8 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings (3) [T ransparent] setting (GT14 only) 1. Select [Common] [Env ironment Setup] [GOT Setup], check [Enable GOT Setup], and select the [T ransparent] menu. 2. After [Controller CH No.] is displayed, check the channel No. connected to the target PLC of multiple GOT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 619

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings 20 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20.4.2 Comm unication detail settings Make the setti ngs according to ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 620

    20 - 10 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings (3) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10) (4) MELSEC-A (GT10) POINT POINT POINT (1) C ommunication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communica tion Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 621

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.5 Precau tions 20 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20.5 Precautions  GOT's communication timing (1) GOT's commun ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 622

    20 - 12 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.5 Precautions ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 623

    MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 624

    ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 625

    21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21 - 1 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel F unction? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2 21.2 System Configuration . . . . . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 626

    21 - 2 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? Multi-channel Function is a function to m onitor up to four F A controllers (PLC CPU, te mperature controlle r , inverter , etc.) on one GOT by writing multiple communication drive rs in the GOT . (For GT155 , up ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 627

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.1 What is Mu lti-channel Function? 21 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Features of the multi-channel fun ction (1) With a single unit of GOT , the syste ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 628

    21 - 4 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration 21.2 System Configuration 21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperat ure controller and servo ampl ifier , etc. Therefore, the system conf iguration, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established. In addition, each system can be ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 629

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.2 System Configuration 21 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION POINT POINT POINT Controllers that use Channels No.5 to 8 The following shows the drivers tha t c ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 630

    21 - 6 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration 21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection One GOT can make several Et hernet connectio ns and the bus or network conn ections. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several netw orks are linked, can be established. MELSECNET/H Communication driver MELSEC-FX Communication driver Ethernet ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 631

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21.3.1 Basics of in terface selection This section expl ains basic knowl e dg ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 632

    21 - 8 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) S pecifications *1 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Contr oller Network connection, CC-Link co nnection (intelligent device st ation) *2 Ethernet connection, MODBUS ® /TCP co nnection *3 Gateway function, MES interface functi on, Ethernet download *4 Fingerpri ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 633

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *6 GT16M-V4, GT15V -75V4, GT16M-R2, GT15V -75R1, GT16M-V 4R1, GT15V -75V4R1, GT16M-ROUT , GT15V -75R ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 634

    21 - 10 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings  Calculating consumed current For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader , or a RF ID controller , the total current for the extension units, bar code reader , or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply . For the current that the GOT can supply and t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 635

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (3) Calculation example (a) When connecting the GT15-J7 1BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 636

    21 - 12 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing System selection for using the multi- channel functio n is explained be low . Make selection and setting for the multi-channel function by following the order shown below . System selection Determine the connection type and the ch annel N ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 637

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 13 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3.3 Determining the connection ty pe and channel No. (System s election)  Determining the con ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 638

    21 - 14 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings Connection ty pe Reference Serial connection Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Computer link connection 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION CC-Link connection (via G4) 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Inverter co nnection 15. INVER TER CONNECTION Servo amplifier connect ion 16. SER V ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 639

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 15 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION The following sh ows the appl icable combinations of con nection types, the number of channels, and ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 640

    21 - 16 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) GT15 For GT15, the combination s of the bus, network, or Eth e rnet connection and the serial connecti on are available as shown in the following table. (Continued to next page) Connection ty pe Reference Bus/network/Ethernet connection Bus connection 5. BUS CONNECTION Ethernet connecti ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 641

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION Connection type Reference Serial connection Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Compu ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 642

    21 - 18 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings The number of channels and the functions tha t can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table below shows the allowable combinations of c onn ection types, the number of chan nels and restricted functions. : Allowed : Restricted *1 When the functions below are used, the conne ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 643

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION The number of channels and the functi ons that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 644

    21 - 20 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (4) GT12 For GT12, the combinations o f the Ethernet connectio n and the serial connectio n are available as shown in the following table Connection ty pe Reference Ethernet connectio n Ethernet connectio n 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION CNC connection (Ethernet connec tion) 18.2.4Ether net connecti ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 645

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION The number of channel s and the functions that can be used di ffer depending on the GOT to be used. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 646

    21 - 22 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings  Determining the channel No. (1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller , temperature controller , inverter , servo amplifier , CNC, robot controller After determining the connection type to be used, determi ne the channe l Nos. (CH No. 1 to CH No. 4) to be used for the respective connect ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 647

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 23 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3.4 Determining the GOT side in terface (Interface selection) T o u se the multi-channel functio ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 648

    21 - 24 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) GT15 • Install communication units on the extension interfaces. • Use communic ation unit s installed on th e extension in terfaces with the RS-232 interface buil t in the GOT . 3rd stage Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 649

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 25 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION For the connectio n via the connection type selected in 21.3 .3 , select interfaces and communicati ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 650

    21 - 26 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings  GOT interface used for bus connection For the bus connection, use the following communication units. *1 T o mount multiple unit s, the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2) is required. POINT POINT POINT (1) Bus connection units to be used GT15-QBUS(2) and GT15-ABUS(2) can be used ind ependen t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 651

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 27 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  GOT interface used for Ethern et connection For the Ethernet connection, use the followi ng int ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 652

    21 - 28 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) GT15 *1 The operator authentication (external authenticat ion or fingerpri nt authentication) or the F A transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 int erface built in the GOT . *2 For the RS-422 communication using the RS-232 interface built in the GOT , the RS-422 con ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 653

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 29 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (b) Remote personal computer opera tion (serial), video di splay fun ction, multimedia functi on an ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 654

    21 - 30 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) Combinations of units that affect the number of available channels The following are examples of unit combinations th at a ffect the number of available channels. POINT POINT POINT Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation positio n) For details on the precaution ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 655

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 31 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION Example 2) T o add the serial connection (1 cha nnel) to the system using the bus co nnection (unit ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 656

    21 - 32 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet. Selection of interface (communication unit) Write down the name of interface and the model name of communication unit to be used for each of the connection type. (Continued to ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 657

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 33 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet Write down the following items to the check sheet. Attachin ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 658

    21 - 34 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 3. After writing down CH No., write down the communication driver name for each connection type. For the communication drivers used for the respective connection types, refer to the following. Chapters of each respective connection type * For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension i ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 659

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 35 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3.5 Setting for communication settings Make communication settings based on the interface and th ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 660

    21 - 36 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings Example: Setting example for "Bus connecti on (1 channel ) + Serial conne ction (3 channels) + Bar code reade r" (In the case of th e GT157 ) 4 5 1 2 3 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P) OMRON temperature controller connection Serial communication unit (GT15-RS4-9P) Inverter ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 661

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 37 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION Example: Setting example for "MELSECNET/H connection (1 channel) + Serial conn ection (1 chann ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 662

    21 - 38 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings Example: Setting example for Ethernet conn ecti on (4 channels) (In the case of the GT1685) Y ASKAW A PLC Ethernet connection MODBUS /TCP connection YOKOGA WA PLC Ethernet connection QCPU Ethernet connection Ethernet interface built in the GOT ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 663

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 39 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3.6 Items to be checked before starting drawing The following describes that should be understo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 664

    21 - 40 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings  Clock function Set the controller for which adjust/broadca st should be executed by the CH No. GT Designer3 V ersio n Screen Design Manual  F A transparent function Set the controller for which the F A transparent function should b e executed by the CH No. 22.5.1 Sett ing communicati ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 665

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.4 Precau tions 21 - 41 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.4 Precautions 21.4.1 Precautions for hardware T o use the multi-channel func tion, an option fu nctio ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 666

    21 - 42 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet This section provides the check sheet to be used for Comm unication Settings when the mult i-channel function is used. Sections 21.3.3 to 21.3.5 contain explanations of the items to be che cked on the check sheet. Checking items expla ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 667

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Che ck Sheet 21 - 43 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Check sheet No.1 (selection of co nnection type and interface) (1) Channel No ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 668

    21 - 44 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet  Check sheet No. 2 (selection of GOT side interface) Attaching the communication unit ( 1.3.7) (1) GT16 (4) (2) Extension interface 1 1rd stage 2rd stage 3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Com. unit name CH No . Com. unit name CH No . 1rd stage 2rd stage 3rd stage Com. unit ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 669

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Che ck Sheet 21 - 45 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) GT15 * For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. (7) (4 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 670

    21 - 46 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 671

    F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22. F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 1 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 672

    ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 673

    22 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22 - 1 22. F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.1 F A T ransparent Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2 22.2 Compatible Sof tware . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 674

    22 - 2 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.1 FA Transparent Function 22. F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.1 F A T ransparent Function The F A transparent fun ction allows the sequence programs of the Mitsubishi PLC to be read, written and monitored from a personal computer connected via a GOT . 22.2 Comp atible Software The following shows the software comp ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 675

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.2 Compatibl e Software 22 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Connecting the GOT and pers onal computer with RS-232 (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 676

    22 - 4 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. *1 MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) V ersion B1 or la ter is required to use the F A transp arent function. *2 FR C onfigurator(FR-SW2-SETUP-W J) Ver .1.02 or later ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 677

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.2 Compatibl e Software 22 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following sh ows the softwar ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 678

    22 - 6 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software  Connecting the GOT and personal compute r with USB (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. *1 GX Developer Version 8.22Y or later is re quired to use th e FA transp arent function. GX Developer V ersion 8.68W o ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 679

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.2 Compatibl e Software 22 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following sh ows the software a ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 680

    22 - 8 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. *1 GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later is re quired to use t he F A transparent function. GX Developer V ersion 8.68W or later is required to use the F A transparen ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 681

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.2 Compatibl e Software 22 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PC with Eth ernet (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Bus con ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 682

    22 - 10 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. *1 GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is re quired to use t he F A transparent function. *2 GX Works2 V ersion 1.16S or later is re quired to use the F A transpar ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 683

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored The following models support F A tra ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 684

    22 - 12 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored *1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the mu ltiple CPU sy stem since Q12DCCPU-V1 and Q24DHCCPU-V have no direct coupled I/F . *2 When using Q12DCCPU-V1 or Q24DHCCPU-V as the connect ed CPU, only MX Component can be used. When accessing other CPUs relaying Q12DCCPU-V or Q24DH ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 685

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 13 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU sy ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 686

    22 - 14 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. *2 Do not execute the write dur ing RUN in the bus connection. Series Model name T arget software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Co ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 687

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 15 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CP U system since Q173NCCPU has ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 688

    22 - 16 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored  When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet (Continued to next page) *1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since QnUDEHCPU has no direct coup led I/F . *2 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 689

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connec tion a ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 690

    22 - 18 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Series Model name T arget sof tware Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Et hernet connection *1 MELSEC-A (AnCPU ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 691

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connec tion a ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 692

    22 - 20 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. *2 GT1 1 is not supported. *3 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PL C in bus connection. *4 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 693

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and persona l computer with modem (Continued to ne ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 694

    22 - 22 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Series Model name T arget software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection *1 C Controller modu ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 695

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 23 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connec tion a ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 696

    22 - 24 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Series Model name T arget software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection *1 Motion controller ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 697

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 25 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connec tion are only GT145 5-QTBDE and ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 698

    22 - 26 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22.4 System Configuration 22.4.1 GX Developer , GX Works2, GX LogViewer , MX C omp onent, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging Configuration T ool, Sett ing/Monitoring tool for C Controller module  When connecting the GOT and personal comp uter with serial or USB *1 Applicable to the QCPU only *2 G ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 699

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 27 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PC with Eth ernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) *1 The destinati ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 700

    22 - 28 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration  When connecting the GOT and personal comp uter with modem *1 For connectable modems, system equipment and connec tion cables, refer to t he following T echnical News. List of valid d evices applicable for GOT1000 series (T10-0039) *2 GT10 is not applicab le to the bus connection. *3 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 701

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 29 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.4.2 PX D eveloper , GX Configurator GOT PC PLC Varies according to the connection type. Conn ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 702

    22 - 30 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22.4.3 MT Developer , MT Works2  When connecting the GOT and personal comp uter with serial or USB *1 GT10 is not applicab le to the bus connection. *2 GT1 1 and GT10 are not applicable to the Ethernet connectio n. *3 The use of RS-232/USB conversion adapt or requires an inst allation ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 703

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 31 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PC with Eth ernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) *1 The destinati ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 704

    22 - 32 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22.4.4 MR Configurator , MR Configurator2  When connecting the GOT and personal comp uter with serial or USB *1 Only MR Configurator2 is compatible with th e Ethernet connection. Connection type dependant Communication driver Connection type dependant Communication driver GOT Servo am ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 705

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 33 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PC with Eth ernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) *1 The destinati ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 706

    22 - 34 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22.4.5 FR Configurator 22.4.6 F X Configurator-FP , FX Configurator-EN *1 The use of RS-232/USB conversion adapt or requires an inst allation of the dedicated communication driver onto personal computer . RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor User' s Manual Inverter GOT Varies according to ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 707

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 35 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.4.7 R T T oolBox2 *1 CRnD-700 is not applicable to the bus connection, the direct CPU connec ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 708

    22 - 36 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.5 GOT Side Settings 22.5 GOT Side Settings 22.5.1 Setting communication interface  Controller setting Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 3. Set M ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 709

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.5 GOT Side Settings 22 - 37 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 Click the [Setting] button and per form the s etting in the [GOT IP Address Setti ng] screen. P ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 710

    22 - 38 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.5 GOT Side Settings  GOT Setup When using the multi-channel function (only GT16 , GT15, GT14, GT12), specify the channel No. on which F A transparent function is executed. 1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [GOT Setup] from the menu. 2. Check [Enable GOT Setup]. 3. Select the [T ra nsparent] tab ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 711

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 39 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer , PX ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 712

    22 - 40 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection( when connec ted to t he QJ71C24(N)) (GX Configurator is not supported.) 1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer . 2. The [T ra nsfer Setup] is displayed. 3. Set the [T ransfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial PL ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 713

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 41 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication (when connecting to QCP ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 714

    22 - 42 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (when connecting to FXCPU) POINT POINT POINT How to operate GX Developer For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. GX Developer V ersion Operating Manual 12. The screen returns to [T ran sfer Se ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 715

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 43 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 The following shows the procedure to set the F A transp ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 716

    22 - 44 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting (2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N)) 1. Click the Connection D estination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displa ye ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 717

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 45 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (3) Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection (a) Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 718

    22 - 46 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting (b) Co nnecting to FXCPU 10. S peci fy the number for [Network No.] and [S tation No.] same as the numb er assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [PLC type], the setting is not required. 11 . Specify the IP address for [IP Address] same as the IP address as ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 719

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 47 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (4) Connecting the GOT and Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF- ETB) in Ethernet connection, and ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 720

    22 - 48 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 1. Click the Connection D estination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displa yed. 3. Set the [T ran sfer Setup Connection1]. PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT 4. ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 721

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 49 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 9. [GOT (Ethernet) T ransparent Setting] is displayed . Here, set the Ethe rnet modul ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 722

    22 - 50 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet conn ection (GT16, GT15 and GT14 only) (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) 16. Network Co mmunication Route Detailed Setting of CC IE Field is ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 723

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 51 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C2 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 724

    22 - 52 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer The following shows the procedure to set the F A transparent function of GX LogViewer . 6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. 7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting f ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 725

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 53 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.4 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP The following shows the procedure to set t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 726

    22 - 54 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer This section explains the pro cedure to set the F A transparent function of MT Developer with an exampl e of connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series). 1. Click [Communication] [Communica tion Setting] in MT Developer . 2. Check-mark ei ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 727

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 55 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2 This section explai ns the procedure to set the F A ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 728

    22 - 56 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication 1. Click the Connection D estination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2. 2. The [T ra nsfer Setup] is displayed. 3. Set the [T ransfer Setup]: PC side ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 729

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 57 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 730

    22 - 58 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.7 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator Make the F A transparent se ttings w ith the of MT Developer . For details, refer to the following: 22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Develo per 22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 Make the F A transp ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 731

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 59 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP This section explains th e procedure to s ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 732

    22 - 60 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.1 1 Acces sing by FX Configurator- EN This section explains the pro cedure to set the F A transparent function of the FX Configurat or-EN. 1. Click [T ransfer setup] on the FX Configurator-EN. 2. Mark the [Serial port/USB] checkbox in [Connecting interface]. 3. Check-mark ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 733

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 61 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.12 Accessing by RT T oolBox2 This section explai ns the procedure to set the F A ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 734

    22 - 62 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  Connecting the GOT and Controller in Ethernet connection 1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT T oolBox2. Click [Edit Project]. 2. Set [Method] to [CRnQ]. 3. Click [Detail]. 4. Check-mark either of the fo llowing in [Serial port]. Mark the [ ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 735

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 63 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator The following shows the procedure to set the F A ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 736

    22 - 64 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.15 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration T ool The following shows th e procedure to set the F A transparent function of LCPU Logging Configura tion T ool . 22.6.16 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module The following shows the procedure to set the ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 737

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 65 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication 5. Mark the [via GOT(Bu ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 738

    22 - 66 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  When connecting the GOT and persona l computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15, and GT14 only) (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection 1. Click the Connection D estination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation windo ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 739

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.7 Precau tions 22 - 67 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions 22.7.1 Precautions common to each software  GOT interface required to use the F A t ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 740

    22 - 68 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions (2) When the F A transparent function is used in a bus connection When the F A transparent function is used in a bus connection, the following GX Developer function s or GX W orks2 functions can not be exec uted. The message [The executed fu nction is not supported. Please check the manual and ot ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 741

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.7 Precau tions 22 - 69 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT multi-drop connection F A transparent function is availa ble for each GOT i ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 742

    22 - 70 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions  When performing [Read to PLC], [W rite to PLC] and other file operations on GX Developer , GX Works2 If any of the fol lowing GOT functi ons is executed d uring the file operation such as [Read to PLC] or [Write to PLC], an error may occur on the GOT , GX Deve loper , or GX Works2. In this ca ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 743

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.7 Precau tions 22 - 71 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION • Reading/Writing files of ladder edit  When PLC write is failed while using the F A transp arent ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 744

    22 - 72 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions 22.7.4 When using MR Configurator , MR Configurator2  Unavailable functions and restrictions For the use via the motion controller , there are unavailable functions an d restrictions. For details on the restrictions, refer to the help screen of MR Configurator .  Monitor speed of GOT Since ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 745

    Index-1 INDEX INDEX [A] ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ........ A-24 ACCESS RANGE FOR MO NITORING ............. .... 3-1 AnCPU type Bus connection .................... ............. ................ . 5-9 CC-Link connection (int elligent devi ce station) ................ ............. ............ ................. ............. .. 13-6 Computer l ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 746

    Index-2 [E] Ethernet connection ............ ............. ............. ......... 8-1 [F] FA transparent function ................ ............... 22-1,22-2 FXCPU Direct connection to CPU .......... ................ ....... 6-10 Ethernet connection .............. .................... ......... 8-9 [G] GOT connector specifications ......... ....... ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 747

    Index-3 INDEX Computer link connection ................................ 7-29 Direct connection to CPU .............. ................... 6-28 Ethernet connection ................... ................ ...... 8-49 FA transparent function ........ ................ .......... 22-67 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNE CTION .. ............. 19-30 INVERTER CONNECTIO N . ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 748

    Index-4 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ........................ 21-4 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 con nection function ..................... ............ ............. .............. 20-2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CO NNECTION... ....... 17-2 Servo amplifier connection ........ ................ ....... 16-3 [T] Terminating resistors of GO T ... ............. ....... ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 749

    REVISIONS - 1 REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom lef t of the back cover . Print Date * Manual Number Revision Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-A First edition : Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) V ersion1.01B Nov ., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-B B edition: Comp atible with GT Works3 (ELE) V ersion1.05F • Compatible with iQ W orks Jan.,2010 ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 750

    REVISIONS - 2 * The manual number is given on the bottom lef t of the back cover. © 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORA TION Print Date * Manual Number Revision Nov ., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-O Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) V e rsion1.63R • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is changed. • C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V) compatible • Inverter connection (MELI ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 751

    W ARRANTY Please confir m the followin g product warranty det ails before using thi s product. 1. Gratis W arranty T erm and Gratis W arranty Range If any fault s or defects (he reinafter "Fai lure") found to be the re sponsibility of Mi tsubishi occurs during use of the produc t within th e gratis warranty term, the pro duct shall be rep ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 752

    SH(NA)-080898ENG-P GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT , Windo ws Server , Windows Vi sta, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the Un ited S tates and other countries. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered tr ademarks of Adobe Systems Incorpor ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 753

    Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) Series MODEL MODEL CODE SW1-GTD3-U(CON1)-ELE 1D7MC9 SH(NA)-080898ENG-P(1302)MEE for GT Works3 (ELE) Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan, February 2013. When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service tr ...

  • Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - page 754

    HEADQUARTERS EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. German Branch Gothaer Straße 8 D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 F ax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 CZECH REP. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.-org.sl. Czech Branch Radlická 751/113e CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 F ax: +420 - 251-551-471 FRANCE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. Fr ...

Производитель Mitsubishi Electronics Категория Portable Multimedia Player

Документы, которые мы получаем от производителя устройства Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 мы можем разделить на несколько групп. Это в частности:
- технические чертежи Mitsubishi Electronics
- инструкции обслуживания GOT1000
- паспорта изделия Mitsubishi Electronics
- информационные брошюры
- энергетические этикетки Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000
Все из них важны, однако самую важную информацию с точки зрения пользователя мы найдем в инструкции обслуживания Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000.

Группа документов, определяемая как инструкции обслуживания, делится также на более подробные типы, такие как: Инструкции монтажа Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000, инструкции обслуживания, короткие инструкции или инструкции пользователя Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000. В зависимости от потребностей, Вам необходимо поискать требуемый документ. На нашем сайте Вы можете просмотреть самую популярную инструкцию использования изделия Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000.

Похожие инструкции обслуживания

Полная инструкция обслуживания устройства Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000, как должна выглядеть?
Инструкция обслуживания, определяемая также как пособие пользователя, или просто "руководство" - это технический документ, цель которого заключается в использовании Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 пользователями. Инструкции пишет, как правило технический писатель, языком, доступным для всех пользователей Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000.

Полная инструкция обслуживания Mitsubishi Electronics, должна заключать несколько основных элементов. Часть из них менее важная, как например: обложка / титульный лист или авторские страницы. Однако остальная часть, должна дать нам важную с точки зрения пользователя информацию.

1. Вступление и рекомендации, как пользоваться инструкцией Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - В начале каждой инструкции, необходимо найти указания, как пользоваться данным пособием. Здесь должна находится информация, касающаяся местонахождения содержания Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000, FAQ и самых распространенных проблем - то есть мест, которые чаще всего ищут пользователи в каждой инструкции обслуживания
2. Содержание - индекс всех советов, касающихся Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000, которое найдем в данном документе
3. Советы по использованию основных функций устройства Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 - которые должны облегчить нам первые шаги во время использования Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000
4. Troubleshooting - систематизированный ряд действия, который поможет нам диагностировать а в дальнейшем очередность решения важнейших проблем Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000
5. FAQ - чаще всего задаваемые вопросы
6. Контактные данные Информация о том, где искать контактные данные производителя / сервисного центра Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 в данной стране, если самостоятельно не получится решить проблему.

У вас вопрос, касающийся Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000?

Воспользуйтесь формуляром, находящимся ниже

Если с помощью найденной инструкции Вы не решили свою проблему с Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000, задайте вопрос, заполнив следующий формуляр. Если у какого то из пользователей была похожая проблема с Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 со всей вероятностью он захочет поделиться методом ее решения.

Перепишите текст с картинки

Комментарии (0)